JP7419099B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Conventional gaming machines can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a reach effect, and during a battle effect, it is also possible to execute a slow motion effect that slows down the playback speed of the battle effect. There are some (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the playback speed of the battle effect is slowed down as a slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect also becomes slow, giving the player a sense of discomfort. be.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is capable of controlling to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area, a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area, and a third display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the performance video in a performance mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous mode as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to notify the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When reporting a disadvantageous aspect as a presentation result, the presentation result of the disadvantageous aspect is notified using the first display area while displaying the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
After displaying the effect video that progresses at a second speed in the second period, it is possible to perform a still effect that displays a still image obtained by making the effect video still.
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, variable display of decorative identification information can be performed in response to variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information,
In the third display area, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information indicating that variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are being performed,
Variable display of the special identification information can be performed in the same period in both the first period and the second period,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
When the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the control game is brought into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state). A possible gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1),
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video,
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100);
An updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis), an amplification circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, amplification circuit 079SG134), and a sound that is amplified by the amplification circuit. speakers (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). (As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, highly reproducible sound effects can be output from the speakers at an appropriate volume. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even when the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

Further, the embodiments of the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 or 3 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times a special figure game is executed in a normal gaming state (the number of times a variable display is executed) is 1000, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.). When a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur even after reaching the number of times (special number of times), the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability of a jackpot being determined as a result of the special drawing game is increased. It is increased to about 1/100, making jackpots more likely to occur in subsequent special game games, and jackpots may occur even if the number of special game games (number of variable display executions) reaches 1000 in normal gaming conditions. When there was no such thing, there was something that generated a short time state instead of a variable state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief for the player is insufficient when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and in view of this, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the display to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100);
An updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). (As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
Predetermined suggestion performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-49, executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a preview performance) when the variable display is executed part) and
Based on the establishment of the special condition, a special notification effect (for example, the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2) , blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53(B), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54(C), etc.); , as shown in FIG. 12-23, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638),
The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see Figure 12-50).
According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each performance type of a look-ahead preview performance. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a notice performance execution decision table and a notice performance mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a time-saving rush production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of effects when executing a variable display that shortens rescue time in modification example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution determination table and a preview performance mode determination table in Example 2; 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an example.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance that is subsequent to the first period, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be outputted by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and sound effects are output at the normal playback speed of V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis), an amplification circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, amplifier circuit 079SG134), and a reproduction circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit. The device is characterized in that it includes speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, highly reproducible performance sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting a speed related to a performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance by the sound output means during a predetermined period in the second period at the same speed as in the first period; In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the second reach effect, etc.) can be output at a speed different from the first period. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 3rd reach performance and the 4th reach performance, the speaker is used as in the first half of the execution period of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output from 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, in the second half of the execution period of the second half of each reach production of the 1st reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production, the playback speed is V4. (For example, the part where the production sound is output at a playback speed that is different from the playback speed V4 (for example, playback speed V5, which is slower than V4))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the effect sound can be made different for a specific period within the second period in which the effect video is displayed at the second speed, so it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game's interest through the performance sound including music and sound effects.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
comprising a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light and changing the light emission mode at least in the first period and the second period;
The effect execution means is capable of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a shorter cycle than the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and the second half of the fourth reach performance, each execution period of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance (The part where the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than the execution period of the first half of the reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period of change of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period when the progress speed of the performance is slow, thereby improving the performance effect of the second period.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) in which an effect animation of a character is displayed in the first display area and an effect sound is outputted by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the effect animation of the character; Information display that operates the information display related to the variable display (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), 2(C); moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Regarding the information presentation, it is possible to perform an information presentation in which the information display operates at the same operating speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIGS. 10-19 to 10- 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the rotating display of the hold display is rotated at the rotation speed V3. , the part where the movement of the caption is displayed at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change from period to period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The total area of the first display area is larger than the total area of the second display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than that of the second display area 079SG005Sa). (a portion wider than the combined area of the area and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to more easily recognize the predetermined presentation than the information presentation, thereby improving the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or Form 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an information effect in which the information display always operates at the same operating speed during at least a variable display period other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. -18 to Figure 10-25, during the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is executed at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the caption is executed at movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operating speed of information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 8,
The information presentation is a moving display presentation that sequentially moves and displays information indicating the state of the presentation in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, a moving display of a message according to the gaming state in the telop display area 079SG005T). ),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect that moves and displays the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C)). As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move to the left again. (the part that is moved towards the right)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance. ,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Within the second period, it is possible to perform an effect production that is different from the predetermined production and that enhances the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the second half execution period of the second reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, to enhance the performance effect of the second period, and to make the players aware that the second period has ended and the notification performance will be executed through the effect performance. It's easy to do.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The performance execution means is
The effect production may be performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C), and a mode as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)). As shown in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect production in a manner in which the degree of effectiveness of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially (for example, FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28( As shown in D), the number of concentrated lines increases as the battle performance progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness of increasing the production effect of the predetermined production increases sequentially, the effect production indicates that the notification production will be executed at the end of the second period. This makes it easier for people to recognize the information.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect that informs whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to the variable display in the second display area. Effects (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a moving display of a subtitle;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30(D), As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) and FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area that combines the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify the player that a privilege has been awarded. It can be easily recognized by players.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 12,
The performance execution means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a hold display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 079SG005D and a second hold storage display area 079SG005U) ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the hold display, the first hold memory display area 079SG005D, the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area where not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate is erased, thereby further increasing the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
As display areas that can display the effect animation, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), A display means (for example, image display device 5) including
A benefit granting means (for example, the CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach performance), a notification performance that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance), and an information performance related to the variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing
Equipped with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area a portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
During the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes, but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Since the visibility of the second display area does not change, it is also possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is a means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a first drawing layer from the first drawing layer. is an upper drawing layer, and includes a second drawing layer (e.g., first image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area. control unit 123);
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn by the image generation means in the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer is changed by the second image data (a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea that is drawn as an image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the visibility of the first display area can be accurately changed without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to Form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing hierarchy from a specific position away from an area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing hierarchy to an area corresponding to the second display area. (For example, as shown in modification example 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is moved from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing in an enlarged manner toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period from a specific position to an area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The performance execution means is
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means (for example, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the jackpot game (a part that can notify that it is not controlled by the state),
It is possible to execute a movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that prompts a player's movement by displaying a movement promotion image in the first display area for executing the notification effect;
Although the visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance decreases, the visibility of the action promotion performance does not decrease (for example, although the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases, The visibility of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as data images does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the motion promotion performance stand out from the predetermined performance, so that it is possible to effectively urge the player to perform the motion.

Form 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), an information effect that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after the end of the predetermined effect, and an information effect that operates an information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- Rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 2(B), and moving display of the subtitle in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) A possible production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A pre-notification performance that displays a specific still image corresponding to a stoppage of the progress of the predetermined performance being executed in the first display area during a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance. (For example, still image display effect)
The information display operation in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, even during the still image display performance execution period, the first pending The rotating display of the pending display in the storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the part where the moving display of the subtitle continues in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by displaying the specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the still image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B)). As shown, the color of the still image is inverted when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect is being executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the still image display effect is pattern SG- 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, but the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the color of the still image displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are inverted. (The color of the 4th pattern is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information performance when the pre-announcement performance is executed (the color of the information performance image does not change, so if the color changes (This makes it easier to recognize that it is a specific still image.)

Form 21 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying a directed video (for example, an image display device 5),
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance.
Equipped with
The predetermined performance includes a first section (for example, a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second section after the first section (for example, a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance),
The first section and the second section each refer to the first period (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect, the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the first half execution period of the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect). (first half performance period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach performance second half execution period, second reach performance second half execution period, third reach performance second half execution period, fourth reach performance second half execution period) including the second half of the reach performance (execution period),
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach effect, the first reach effect, etc. During the execution period of the first half of each of the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In the second period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25). , a portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A first pattern in which the predetermined effect is transferred to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, or the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without moving to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19). The present invention is characterized in that it can be executed by variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, the predetermined effect can be executed at the second speed in the first section and then move to the second section, or the predetermined effect can be executed without moving to the second section. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game ends and whether or not the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the second section and a bonus is awarded, the game's interest can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The performance execution means is
A termination suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect ends in the first section without moving to the second section (for example, when an ally character is defeated by an enemy character).
The end suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21 , as shown in FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance and the second half of the third reach performance, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the first (a part in which the second half of the reach performance execution period or the second half execution period of the third reach performance is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in The part that displays the video when the enemy character collapses due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the videos of when a friendly character collapses. (The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progressing speed of the predetermined performance when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance, the progressing speed when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent expectations for the award of the benefit from becoming excessively high, and when it is announced that the benefit will not be awarded, the 4th speed production video will not be displayed. Since it is also possible to prevent players' dissatisfaction from increasing excessively, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to perform a movement, and a notification effect (for example, , a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When the performance video of the predetermined performance is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the movement promotion performance can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, 4. The part where the operation promotion performance is executed when the video display of the reach performance is being executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed while the movement promotion presentation is being executed during the second period, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation. can.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The movement promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying a valid detection period during which the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means is accepted. ,
When the effective detection period ends, the performance execution means detects a movement of the player by the movement detection means within the effective detection period from a timing later than the end of the effective detection period. It is possible to perform the same notification effect as in the case of push (The part that executes the same jackpot notification performance or loss notification performance based on the end of the operation reception period for the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification effect will not be executed before the effective detection period has elapsed, so the motion detection means will detect the player's motion. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the benefit will be awarded during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the end of the predetermined performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to 10-35 C), in the jackpot notification performance, the attack of an ally character The part of the video in which the character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progression speed of V1, while the part of the video in which the enemy character collapses is displayed at a progression speed of V2).
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 As shown in -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the video of the failure notification effect is moving at the same speed as the progress speed. (Part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, when the award of a benefit is announced as a notification effect, a performance video with the progress speed at the fourth speed is displayed, so that the benefit is awarded. It is possible to impress on the player what has been done by the performance video of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to Form 25,
The effect execution means executes a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted (pattern SG-16) as shown in FIG. 10-16) during the second period only when a benefit is given. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the still image display effect (2)).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect will be executed.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to Form 26,
The benefit granting means provides, as the benefits, a first benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a non-probability variable jackpot) and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot). It is possible to grant
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in Modified Example 079SG-4) that notifies that a benefit will be provided after once notifying that the benefit will not be provided in the notification performance. ,
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the notification performance informs that a benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in Modified Example 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot),
When the special performance is performed during the second period and after the notification performance informs that no benefits will be awarded, the first benefit or the second benefit is granted. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the notification effect is once lost, and then the revival effect is executed, the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Some parts are controlled in a gaming state and others are controlled in a jackpot gaming state with a probability-variable jackpot.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special performance is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the grant of a benefit will be announced in the notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Ba), and a second movement promotion image different from the first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). A movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that displays on the display means to encourage the player to perform a movement, and a judgment as to whether or not a privilege is given based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance to be notified (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The operation promotion effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect) part),
When performing the movement promotion effect using the first movement promotion image, the first movement promotion image is displayed while visually displaying the effect animation of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so the player can see the battle performance through the effect image 079SG005E).
When performing the movement promotion effect using the second movement promotion image, the display means displays the effect animation of the predetermined effect in a manner that makes it more difficult to see than the first movement promotion image. , the second operation promotion image is displayed in a display area wider than the display area of the first operation promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba). When displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so the visibility of the battle performance is lower than when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which benefits are given when the second operation promotion image is displayed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first movement promotion image and the second movement promotion image is displayed as the movement promotion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to Form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying an effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means while the first movement promotion image is being displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as the operation promotion effect, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the battle effect (The part where the presentation video is displayed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the performance moving image of the predetermined performance is displayed at the second speed while the first movement promotion image is being displayed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 29,
The performance execution means is
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) can be performed, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the first half execution period of the third reach effect) in the predetermined effect, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach effect) is executed. It is possible to transition to the second half of the performance period and the second half of the third reach performance),
A first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18) in which the predetermined effect is notified of the granting of a benefit without moving to the second specific section after the first specific section of the first predetermined effect is executed. and a variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. , the variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and the super reach β3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25), the first specific section of the first predetermined effect and the first A third specific pattern (for example, the variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or the variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution with the second specific section, is feasible and
both when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance. A performance video whose progress speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the first reach performance) When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach effect to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second half execution period of the first reach effect changes When transitioning to the execution period of the first half of the reach performance, When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance, From the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance (The part where BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at playback speed V4, same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined performance, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance. However, since the output speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section or from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progressing speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance to the second speed, the player can easily recognize the branching of the predetermined performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the production control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 generates a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect to be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T changes according to the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to the highest and image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1 > image data 2 > image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on image data 1, and the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image on the lower layer. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose advancing speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the reach performance that the player perceives is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-reach effect that the player recognizes is a second speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, this feature section 079SG configures a slow-motion effect in which the progress speed of the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing down the video progress speed of the effect video, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

In addition, although this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that notifies that the jackpot is open during the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special pattern in the special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature part 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jackpot". This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 079SG only provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach effect where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach effect of Super Reach α2 (the reach effect executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach effect, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display results that reach the jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the same as the rate at which the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth reach effect to be described later is executed, and the variable display result is a reach effect in which the result is a jackpot or a miss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effect can be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variation patterns of the super reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α series. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is an area for holding various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 10-11(A). Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the effect control board 12 is stored in the pending memory. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the production control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small win, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, the stop symbol is a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance is selected. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect or the second half of the third ready-to-reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15, if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as the performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern is determined to be pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the color of the still image changes.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes the operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinking or lighting. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the first reach performance begins, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of the enemy character A collapsing due to the successful attack of the ally character A is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect starts, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the second half of the first reach performance is executed, the battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after ally character A's attack fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (B), when the first half of the second reach effect is executed, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half of the second reach performance comes to an end, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the battle effect video decreases to V2, and the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one is executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the proceeding speed V3 without change, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the video of the battle effect. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

Furthermore, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-29(E), the battle performance will be used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 10-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at a progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) will be displayed as the still image display effect. ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 10-20. In this example, a video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, but a video in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

Also, as a failure notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 10-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack until it is defeated by enemy character B without hitting is displayed at a progress speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (a display of extinguishing of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect animation such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (flash) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-31 (E) to 10-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (A) to 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation of the chance-up effect, while the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up performance, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the performance video of the chance-up performance. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the performance animation of the chance-up performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing this, the player can easily recognize from which decorative symbol combination the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the third reach performance, Character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach effect.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (A) to 10-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, friendly character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. Furthermore, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, and at the same time, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-25 and 10-35 (E) to 10-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, as the failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decoration pattern stops with a combination of failures. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), As shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is illustrated. may be performed, but the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Further, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is possible to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect or when playing a jackpot game. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotational speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the characters are displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, the presentation effect of the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the effect presentation, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) and 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the display of the concentrated lines increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the effect production according to the present invention is illustrated as a display of concentrated lines, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is gradually increased (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a mode for changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a mode in which the color of the still image is inverted has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is easy to recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, which excessively increases the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25, and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), and 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a proceeding speed V2 slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be other than the push button 31B, such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor may be used.

Also, Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C ), in the jackpot notification performance in feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the friendly character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progress speed of V1. Displayed at speed V2. In contrast, Figures 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10- 30(G), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C) to 10-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stowed away. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more reach effects can be executed. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, after the reach effect ends, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(A) to 10-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(A) to 10-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a jackpot notification performance, or that it will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is performed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as a part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(A) to 10-38(F) as a modified example 079SG-3, it is similar to the modified example 079SG-2. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed telop may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. You can. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, 10-29, 10-30, 10-31, and 10-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance includes the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and flashed before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

Further, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that performs a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that performs at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantage when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 1) that can perform controlled games in a state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R and audio control board 13) capable of outputting performance sounds. The installed voice synthesis IC079SG132, audio data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134), display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying the effect animation, displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and the corresponding a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a reach performance) that outputs a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of a character performance video; and a display that is more variable than in a normal state. A state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) -19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display (for example, as shown in Fig. 12-13) (a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect execution means executes an effect animation in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed in a first period of the predetermined effect. can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the execution of the first half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect) During the period, the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is A presentation video having a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach presentation, a second reach presentation, a third reach presentation, etc. Regarding the part where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the reach effect and the fourth reach effect), the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is as follows: In both the first period and the second period, the sound output means can output the speed related to the effect sound at the same speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM, performance sounds, etc. from speakers 8L and 8R are played back at normal playback speed. ), the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance includes music and sound effects (for example, a part where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from speakers 8L and 8R) , the state control means is capable of controlling the state to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13). As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the update The means updates the numerical information depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or when the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, An example is a gaming machine (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the control microcomputer 100).

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the game can be made more interesting by producing sound including music and sound effects. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and also when variable display of the first identification information is executed. Since the numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times than in the case where the player is updated, and the player is more likely to be rescued, so that the player's motivation for playing the game can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give players a sense of discomfort when installed in a gaming parlor and can increase the players' desire to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that is less likely to give players a sense of discomfort during production and can suitably provide relief to players, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are implemented. However, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, and is a special game machine in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-19) that can control the state (for example, time saving state) 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a game control part that executes step 100IWS537) (a part of the microcomputer 100 for executing step 100IWS71), and the state control means is configured to control the state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, (a portion of the computer 100 that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is performed or when variable display of the second identification information is performed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) is an example of a gaming machine. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S909). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, it is determined by, for example, a parity bit or a checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 108IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state (which is also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

Further, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the fluctuating display result is a jackpot and the jackpot game is controlled to a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, even when the fluctuating display result is a loss, the time-save winning symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to shorten the time based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after a jackpot occurs, after a time reduction occurs, after a relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuating display ends a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times), the next jackpot does not occur. Even if a time reduction error does not occur, the time reduction state (relief time reduction) may be applied.

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). (4) control to shorten the variation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of these controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or (1) to (4) may be performed. Some of the controls in (4) may not be performed. For example, which one of (1) to (4) is controlled may be different in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, and a time saving state via a rescue time saving, They may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability of winning a common symbol may be set to 1/1, or the probability of losing may be extremely low, and the probability of winning a common symbol may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) above is not performed, some or all of the controls in (2) to (4) above are performed, so that a high base state is achieved. You can.

Note that it is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the number of times N of time reduction in the rescue time reduction are defined as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time savings)
Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n will be 750 to 900, and the number of time savings N will be 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time savings N is 108 to 108. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" which has the lowest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time savings N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above regulations are satisfied no matter which setting value they are set to.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-47.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth symbol displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this feature section 108IW, a common figure game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this feature section 108IW, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present feature section 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 12-2 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 12-3 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figures 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-probability variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "242/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-3 (B), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2420/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (about 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the variable probability state compared to the non-probable variable state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 12-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is non-deterministic or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3, even if the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value and the probability of losing time is constant as described above, the probability of winning without time saving is fixed. By varying the probabilities between set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent.

In addition, it may be further configured to be controllable to a small winning gaming state. If the configuration is such that the small win can also be determined, for example, the configuration may be such that the small win probability is constant regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In addition, in the case where the small win can also be determined, the structure may be such that there is a small win with time saving that controls the time saving state using the small win as an opportunity.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are just examples, and various ways can be considered for setting the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. When the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100-time variable display ends or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 12-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that there is a 40% probability of a "normal jackpot"; A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 12-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 12-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in FIGS. 12-5(A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the time is shortened, and when the second special symbol fluctuates and the time shortens. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 12-5 is just one example, and various ways of determining the time saving type can be considered. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

Further, for example, if the configuration is configured such that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction, it may be configured so that the time reduction number counter etc. is not uniformly overwritten even if the time reduction is exceeded, or the time reduction failure symbol Depending on the type, the time saving counter etc. may be overwritten or not overwritten in some cases.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, when "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 time reduction times, and when "work time reduction difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 50 time reduction times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is canceled even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after the time reduction is controlled to a time reduction state of 800 time reductions due to the relief time reduction, if a jackpot does not occur even after 800 fluctuation displays are completed, the relief time reduction is resumed. Accordingly, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to relief time reduction is essentially until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each set value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing fluctuations n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 108IW. Of these, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the time-saving state time deviation controlled via the time-saving deviation.

Further, FIG. 12-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving method. Further, FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 12-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for failure in a variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 12-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display, which shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 12-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot with a fluctuation display that shortens the rescue time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened variation) increases the rate at which variable display is executed, and the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, compared to The selection probability is high at 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Also, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving or jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ), and there is no case where a super reach is executed. In other words, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time reduction, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time reduction loss or jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. There is. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. This prevents the user from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via the rescue time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of failure, but it may be configured so that it is executed. For example, in a time saving state controlled via a relief time saving, super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in a time saving state controlled via a time saving loss or a jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. Since the ratio of such events is lowered, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the rescue time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 There is no case where (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where super reach is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened, but a jackpot does not occur. Incidentally, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, the ratio is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 12-7(C)). The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined at the time of a miss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 12-8 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further reduced than in the short time state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, if the fluctuation display shortens the rescue time and the result is a failure, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing the rush) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Ru. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time saving, which is not used for a variation display that does not shorten rescue time, but is used only for a variation display (missing) that shortens rescue time. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry), as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, 12-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state, and it is also possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (J), in this example, if the variation display shortens the relief time and the jackpot is missed, the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time that is not used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time, but is used only for a variation display that shortens the rescue time (jackpot). In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, Fig. 12 -38 (G), (H)) and the same type of performance (for example, see Figure 12-41 (G')), there is a performance that notifies you of a jackpot (for example, Figure 12-41 (G')). (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time saving error during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again, it is the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time saving state time controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-8 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 12-8 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

Furthermore, in this example, the configuration is such that different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), or the time saving state via relief time saving is better than the time saving state via jackpot or loss time saving. Alternatively, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 95XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the 1 designation command for the number of relief time reductions, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, Command 957E(H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command. In this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and it is uniformly issued as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 957F(H) is transmitted.

Command 96XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, Command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command.

Command 97XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of restoration and is transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened when the power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is sent as a command to specify the number of times that the rescue time is shortened at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, a command 9708 (H) is sent as a command for specifying the number of times to save time during recovery.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be transmitted in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the example is shown in which the information is sent to the Internet, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a combination of two commands may be transmitted so that even if the remaining number of commands is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in a specific manner.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving. Command E004 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies to start displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, when no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0). Further, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Also, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode that executes setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode that executes setting confirmation processing, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode ends, and then a customer waiting demo specification Command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A waiting demo specification command is sent. As described later, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 10 seconds elapse without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning, the rescue time saving function is activated. A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). Furthermore, when three minutes have passed without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration movie is played back.

Command F1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. Note that "XX" is set to a value corresponding to the set value.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 12-9 and FIG. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are similar to those shown in FIG. 11.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and send a recovery rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a recovery time rescue time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the rescue time saving number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a recovery time saving time saving number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of times the recovery time is shortened is sent, and the remaining recovery time up to the current rescue time is sent. The number of changes will be notified. Further, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power outage), it is possible to shorten the rescue time. With this configuration, in a situation where a pending memory corresponding to a variable display that shortens the rescue time is stored before a power outage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs.

Note that although this example shows a case where a recovery time reduction number specifying command is transmitted separately from the recovery command at the time of power outage recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened may be set in the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, and then transmitted.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 800 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating the time saving state, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state, and the pending memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the rescue time reduction number counter from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 100IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this feature section 108IW, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 12-2 and 12-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes processing to determine that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 12-2 (A) and Figure 12-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability change flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (N in step 100 IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 or not. (Step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 100 IWS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations up to the time saving time reduction after step 100IWS70 is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "800" (see step 100 IWS172), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901", which is one more, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100 IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time reduction state, or a variable probability state. . In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N at step 100 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 957E(H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100 IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 100 IWS75). . Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and commands 957F as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800). It is checked whether it is (step 100IWS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs production control of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. control to transmit the information to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS79.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect, which will be described later.

For example, as described later, the rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the rescue time reduction occurs, and in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction is The configuration is configured so that the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is sent only when the time reduction occurs, and the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the number 2 of rescue time reductions is sent when the rescue time is shortened from the second time onwards. It may be configured not to do so.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving mode is set (step 100 IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving mode), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time saving state is in the state of time saving via relief time saving, the process of determining whether the time saving is missed after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is determined to be the case without saving. It was decided that

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving state is not uniformly determined as a time saving failure not only during the time saving state via the rescue time saving, but also during the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. In other words, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the process for determining whether the time saving is not achieved after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is not performed as it is. You may decide to set it as an outlier.

Conversely, even in the time saving state via relief time saving, the process from step 100IWS81 onward may be executed to determine the time saving deviation. Further, it may be configured such that both a relief time reduction and a time reduction deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state with priority given to saving time, or it may be configured to control to a time saving state giving priority to a time saving error.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the time saving state is not via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS80 is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that the time saving is not possible without performing the process of determining whether the time saving is not possible after step 100IWS81. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. is carried out, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 100 IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 12-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 12-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 100 IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, when configured to determine both the small hit and the small hit type, a common random number for type determination is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. The configuration may be such that the determination process is performed based on the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a time saving loss A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6". If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the fluctuation display is a jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 12-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702). .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time reduction number of times counter is 0 (in other words, it is a fluctuation display that results in relief time reduction and is off), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 12-8 (I) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less. Check whether it is. Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second pending storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100 IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table F is selected (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table G of is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern table stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is to be used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 12-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sends the result of the decision as to whether or not to make a jackpot, the result of the decision of the jackpot type, and the time saving type, if it has not yet been sent. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS1122). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right hit LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time shortening determination flag is not set (N in step 100 IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets "0.5" to the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "second" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the probability change flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C, and for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the probability change state. The time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is reset (step 100 IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where, when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 100IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 100 IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the relief time saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 time saving times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processing in steps 100IWS143 and S144, in this example, if the time saving state is controlled to be shortened by taking the relief time shortening as an opportunity, the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without hitting the jackpot or losing the time shortening. Taking this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. Thereafter, if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after performing the variable display 800 times, the second relief time saving occurs and the time saving state is controlled. In addition, in this example, a time reduction error does not occur in a time reduction state triggered by a relief time reduction, but it may occur, and when it occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter (step 100IWS147), and checks whether the value of the probability variation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability variation state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS153.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed, thereby transitioning to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation or the probability changing final fluctuation, and ending the right hit notification. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the time-saving final fluctuation or the probability-variable final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, this example shows a case where the definite variable state ends and the time saving state also ends in the definite variable final fluctuation, but this is not the only case; it is also possible to end only the definite variable state and continue the time saving state. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100 IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 100 IWS155). (Step 100IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 ( Step 100IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to ``800'' due to the time reduction failure, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the time reduction failure, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction failure occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, by executing the processing in steps 100IWS166 and S168, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not decided to skip the time saving (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In addition, in this example, by controlling the time saving state at the timing when the relief time becomes short and also setting the relief time shortening counter (set to "800"), it is possible to cause the relief time shortening to occur continuously. Although the time saving state is configured so that once the time saving occurs, the time saving state continues until the jackpot occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the timing when the rescue time is shortened, the rescue time shortening counter is not set, only the time saving state is controlled, and after that, the rescue time shortening counter is set at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display ends and control is returned to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "800" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to 0, and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 800. It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, to secure a production period such as mode transition production, but during the symbol confirmation period, the image display device In step 5, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, but only the small pattern may be displayed, so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which the process of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs, but this is not limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, the time saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times. For example, if the time saving is shortened the first time, the time saving counter is set to ``100'', and if the saving time is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to ``800''. Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIGS. 12-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 12-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the variable display, which shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. Also, if the relief time is shortened, it may be shifted to the time shortening state, so if a symbol that is out of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal will be activated at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output starts.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol confirmation period but also during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously outputted even during the time saving state via the rescue time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100 IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the special symbol stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls to a probability variable state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 108IW will be explained. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A ( (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving loss) (see step 100 IWS166). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clearing processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 100 IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the variable probability state, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is again controlled to the variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100 IWS80), and there is no case where the saving time is shortened. In addition, in the variable probability state, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the control is performed again. The time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state A, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state B is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in the time saving state B, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see step 100 IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state C, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state C is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when 800 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. You can.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving losing symbol is not derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100 IWS79), but this is not limited to such a mode, for example. , it may be configured such that even in the time saving state C, it can be determined that the time saving is over.

Further, in this example, when the variable probability state is controlled, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a lottery process is used to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display, and the variable probability state may be terminated based on the decision to end the variable probability state.

(Main processing for production control)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 12-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In FIG. 12-21, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process in step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in the form of a reduced left-center right ornamental symbol is executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 100IWS702, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative design, synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the variable display of the 4th symbol is executed on the 4th symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a, 21b, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol. be done.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in red as a jackpot symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a special symbol is provided as the time saving loss symbol of the 4th symbol, but the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is not limited to such an embodiment. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 12-22 and 12-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received production control command is a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100 IWS625), the production control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100 IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery (step 100 IWS629), the effect control CPU 120, based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery, causes the image display device 5 to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to display the initial roll according to the number of times (step 100 IWS 630). For example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time during recovery is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time to save is reduced is 100 or less), the initial roll is "112". is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial The result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as the result, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition to displaying the initial result indicating the number of fluctuations remaining when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display indicating the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened may be displayed. , a combination of symbols indicating the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, or a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations, etc. The configuration may be such that the suggestion display is performed at a relatively early stage. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not suggested (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not indicated). (The remaining number of fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 100IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 100 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100 IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time saving state is the same, it is determined whether it is a time saving state via jackpot, a time saving state via time saving, or a time saving state via rescue time saving. Display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in gaming status, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, a common background image is displayed regardless of the time saving state via jackpot, time saving state via time saving loss, or time saving state via rescue time saving. may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. It may be configured as follows.

If the received production control command is a probability variable state designation command (step 100 IWS639), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS640).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126 and S1134). , the lighting of the right hit notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 100 IWS645 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process)
FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. As mentioned above, in this example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, if no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0), the performance control board is transferred from the main board 11. A customer waiting demonstration designation command is sent to No. 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 will perform a performance control CPU 120 if 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winnings after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y in step 105 IWS 250), a telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105 IWS 251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed during a period when no variable display is performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 12-25, FIG. 12-25(A) is a subtitle display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. 12-25(B) is This is a telop display execution lottery table used when the number is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(A) and 12-25(B), in this example, the ratio of displaying telops while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether an advantageous setting value has been set based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Although FIG. 12-25 shows an example of setting value 1 and setting value 6 to simplify the explanation, it is also possible to provide a table corresponding to each setting value, or to provide a table corresponding to each setting value. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105 IWS 254).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop using a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105 IWS253, the presentation mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

Figure 12-25(C) is a subtitle mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 12-25(D) is a drawing table for determining the telop format used when the setting value is set to "6". This is a lottery table for determining the telop format used when

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation mode of the telop displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened by the display mode of the telop while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the performance mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous setting value has been set depending on the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning (Y in step 105 IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is played back (step 105 IWS 256).

Note that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer end when the performance control command etc. at the time of starting winning is received.

FIG. 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 12-26, the screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C), or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

After receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is determined to do so, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, if it has been decided to display the telop display according to the blue presentation mode, the telop display 108IW001 with blue edges is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26(B), the edges are white). ). In addition, if it is decided to display a subtitle display according to the red presentation mode, the subtitle display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26 (D), the subtitle display with a black edge is displayed). ).

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the performance control board 12 side, if 3 minutes elapse without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(C) and (E), the telop display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the production control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

In the pre-read preview setting process (step S161), for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the production control CPU 120 sends production control commands at the time of starting winnings (for example, production control commands for specifying the occurrence of starting winnings, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgments, etc.). ) is received (step 108 IWS701).

If the production control command at the time of starting winning is received, the production control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the production control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether the number is large (step 108 IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the starting winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. If the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. In this case, the advance notice setting process is ended.

In this example, by executing the process in step 108IWS702, a look-ahead preview effect is created that targets the variable display when the relief time becomes short among the variable displays corresponding to the suspended memory stored before the relief time becomes short. While it is possible to execute it, it restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of the pre-read preview performance across the relief time reduction period where the gaming state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed before the relief time is shortened, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and the performance type and performance mode in the case of execution (step 108 IWS703).

FIG. 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. In step 108IWS703, each table shown in FIG. 12-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect, and if so, the effect type and effect mode.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect using the pre-read notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(A). However, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance using the pre-read notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(B).

As shown in Figures 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the pre-read preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher when the result is a failure than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the look-ahead preview performance, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), there is a case where the displayed result is lower in the time saving state C than in the gaming states other than the time saving state C. In addition, the system is configured so that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is low. With such a configuration, in the case of time saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot does not occur even though the advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(C) is used to execute If the game state is time-saving state C, the effect type of the pre-read preview effect to be executed is determined using the pre-read preview effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Decide on the type. Specifically, the performance type is determined to be either a chance performance or a pending change performance.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect when the display result of the change display that is executed before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a chance eye (in this example, "778"). This is a performance that suggests that this will be a jackpot. In the chance effect, for example, an effect is performed to incite whether or not the display result will be a chance result ("778" in this example). Also, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed using a red effect mode, a red chance eye effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when a chance eye effect is executed using a blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change performance suggests that the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance will be a jackpot by displaying the pending display that corresponds to the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance in a display mode that is different from the normal display mode. It is a performance that Also, for example, when a pending change performance is executed in a red production mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when a pending change production is executed in a blue production mode, a blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of pre-read preview effect. Among Figures 12-29, Figures 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance effect, and Figures 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the hold change effect. This is an example.

When a chance effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the first variable display starts as shown in Figure 12-29 (A1), and then as shown in Figures 12-29 (B1) and (C1). The left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Then, as shown in Figure 12-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7", which is the chance number "778", or "6", which is not the chance number "778". A performance that provokes this is carried out. After that, as shown in Figure 12-29 (E1), when the central decorative pattern "7" stops and the chance number "778" stops displaying, a fluctuating display that will become a jackpot will be displayed while it is being held in memory. This suggests the possibility that a corresponding retained memory exists. Note that after the inciting effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance number "778" (for example, "768", etc.) may be stopped and displayed.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when a starting winning occurs, a new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 12-29, but can be performed at any timing after a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode and thereafter until the display of the corresponding hold display and active display ends. The display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the normal mode.

FIG. 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the pre-read preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via rescue. Among FIGS. 12-30, FIG. 12-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via jackpot and the execution period of the advance notice performance, and FIG. 12-30(B) is , is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-read notice performance. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when performing a chance effect as a look-ahead preview effect, in the variable display that is executed from the time when the starting winning occurs until the variable display for the look-ahead target starts. , an effect is performed to incite whether or not the chance pattern will stop, and then the chance pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since such an inciting effect is included, when executing the chance effect, it is necessary to ensure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one fluctuating display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed at the timing when a starting prize occurs or from the time when a starting winning occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the display ends. Then, the pending display and active display according to the changed display mode are continued until the variable display of the prefetch target is completed. In other words, when executing a pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when a starting prize occurs until the variable display of the pre-read target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the pre-read target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead preview performance, the execution period is different between the chance performance and the pending change performance. That is, while the chance effect is executed during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variable display, the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the time saving state via jackpot, the extremely shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of loss, and the shortening variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time saving state via relief In this case, an extremely short variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed when the time is off. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-30, in the time saving state via relief, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance effect.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via jackpot, it is possible to execute both the chance effect and the pending change effect as the look-ahead preview effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance effect is restricted as a look-ahead preview effect, and only the pending change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute a pre-read preview performance depending on the gaming state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read notice performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read notice performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(E) is used to , determines the presentation mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the gaming state is time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect to be executed is determined using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Determine the type of performance. Specifically, either the red presentation mode or the blue presentation mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to perform a pre-read preview performance using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and the case of a jackpot is better than the case of a miss. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher due to the red effect mode than in the case of . Therefore, by executing the pre-read preview performance in the red performance mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With this configuration, in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the decrease in interest when the pre-read preview performance is executed is suppressed by the blue production mode with low jackpot expectation. be able to. In this example, when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the pre-read preview effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, the configuration is such that cases in which the display result is incorrect even though the pre-read preview effect is executed in the red effect mode do not occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 12-28, the pre-read notice can be used in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time) and in the case of not time-saving state C. The performance execution ratio, the type of performance, and the ratio of performance modes can be varied, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, execution of the preview performance is restricted (even if only the preview performance with high expectations is not executed). However, the execution of the pre-read preview effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the event of a failure may be restricted. It may be configured such that the ratio is lowered (or not executed), or the execution ratio of pre-fetch preview performances of types with high expectations may be lowered (or not executed).

Furthermore, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is not restricted. Good too.

When the processing in step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, a chance effect flag is set in step 108IWS704 as execution setting of the chance effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process to be described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting a process table including the chance eye effect. Note that the chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, in step 108IWS704, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (sudden probability variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye pattern (in this example, "778") is determined.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table. In step 108 IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance using the advance notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), and the relief time is shortened. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(B). In addition, when it is decided to execute a preview performance, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in Figure 12-32 (C). However, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(D).

As shown in Figures 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed both when the display result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the preview performance is higher when the result is a success than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result is wrong than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the preview performance is performed during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, and the countdown performance and effect performance described later are executed). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less), a countdown performance and effect performance, which will be described later, are executed, but at this time, the timer is activated as a preview performance. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 12-32(C) and (D), in this example, there is a red presentation mode (for example, a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (for example, a blue presentation image is displayed). The system is configured such that the preview performance is executed in a red performance mode at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) If the display result is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is more than 10), a preview effect is executed using the red effect mode. It is structured so that the percentage of With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in

In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple types of preview performances with different jackpot expectations can be executed, the preview performances of types with high jackpot expectations (for example, if the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 levels, The execution is limited only for the type of preview performance where the jackpot expectation level is 4th level or higher) during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, a preview effect may be executed. You may choose not to limit it.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the case of time saving state C, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted, but the execution of the preview effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is reduced). In this case, it may be configured to reduce the execution rate (or not execute) of the preview performance in case of a failure, or to reduce the execution rate of the preview performance for types with high expectations. The execution rate may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800. (Step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined by the number of relief time shortening 2, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not a designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is selected (step 100 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is none of 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 800, the production control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-shortening effect that the game will be controlled to be in a time-shortening state as a rescue time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the displayed result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a time saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time saving fluctuation jackpot variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) is executed, which is not executed except when the number of variations of relief time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and vary. good. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example, orange) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). (background image of the display color) (see step 078 IWS638), it is possible to notify that the time saving state will be controlled by reducing the rescue time by this change in the background image.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less ( Step 108IWS807). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 108IWS808). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table including countdown effects and effect effects corresponding to ``10''. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is reached is 10 or less, the countdown performance and the effect performance are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. You can. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown performance and effect performance are always executed, but whether or not they are executed by lottery is determined. It may also be possible to decide whether In addition, for example, when the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is not 10 or less, so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances (for example, although they are executed in the same manner as countdown performances and effect performances, , the countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See Figure 12-42) are determined by lottery to be executed or not. Good too. In this case, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less is better than when it is not 10 or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 108IWS807), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution setting of the chance production has been made (step 108IWS809). , when the execution setting of the chance effect has been made, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes the chance effect (including the effect that stimulates whether or not it will become a chance effect) (step 108 IWS810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, a performance in which the chance eye pattern does not stop display after executing the effect to incite whether or not it will be a chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to do so.

If the chance production is not set to be executed, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. You can.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display processing)
12-33 and FIG. 12-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 100IWS847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 100IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 100IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 100IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 100IWS858). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 100IWS857 and the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 12-35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed production period timer (step 100 IWS871), and checks whether the value of the fixed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100IWS872). If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the presentation component) is executed in accordance with n) (step 100IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 100IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step 100 IWS879 ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 100IWS885). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 100IWS889).

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be explained. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time. As shown in Figure 12-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that results in a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and decorative symbol ends, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is displayed. When is stopped and displayed, a missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the missed symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missed symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for a 20 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, a right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-36 (see step 100 IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (the background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the gaming state, and to increase the interest. can be improved.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving mode, will be explained. FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 800 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, which says, "Relief time saving starts in 800 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine that is equipped with a shortened rescue time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and the pattern (in this example, "423") stops. It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similar to FIG. 12-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "Relief time saving starts in 700 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the incitement effect is not executed when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, and the incitement effect is performed when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times). It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, The configuration may be such that the excitement effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which out-of-place symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, effect displays 100IW104B are displayed in a range corresponding to the remaining revolutions. . In this example, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases) as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the time for relief approaches the time).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, It is assumed that a combination of symbols "123" is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (F), when there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) starts. , as shown in FIG. 12-38 (G), a time-saving entry effect is started to notify that the time-saving state (relief time reduction) is being controlled, and a time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a time saving state (relief time saving), and it is possible to improve interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-38(G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbols 100IW100 are not displayed, and only the small symbols 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving production, it is also possible to make notifications that are generally carried out during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent getting hooked, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. may be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush performance may be made in the same manner as in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving rush effect, but may be made during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode effect start display 100IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. Note that from now on, even in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1) is displayed. Ru. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 100IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a jackpot, it can be configured to execute an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" similarly to FIG. 12-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 12-39 (K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received pre-reading determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high probability that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time shortening state via the shortening rescue time (see Figure 12-8 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect that displays the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and it also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 that reads "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 12-38(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a rescue time saving effect mode is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40(M), when the selection of the performance mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush production will be explained. FIG. 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode of the time-saving rush performance. The example shown in FIG. 12-41 is performed following the example shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 12-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, "123 It is assumed that the symbol combination ``'' is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F'), there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time saving mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that although this variable display can shorten the rescue time, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game does not shift to a time saving state due to relief time saving, but shifts to a jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), the time-saving rush performance is started, and the time-saving rush performance display 100IW104C having the same aspect as the time-saving rush performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just like when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (H), when the display of the time-saving effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254" combinations) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 108IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which the game ball is controlled to be a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) in a prize object during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, a time saving effect is executed to notify that a small hit has occurred. Good too.

Next, the so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance will be explained. FIG. 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance.

As shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the number of remaining rotations is reduced to 10 rotations. A countdown display 100IW104A depending on the situation is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake effect is executed, so that the remaining rotations are reduced to 10 rotations. Effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range depending on the number of times. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases).

As shown in FIG. 12-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the transition to rescue time saving is not 0, the time saving entry effect is not executed.

When configuring so-called fake countdown effects and effect effects as shown in Figure 12-42 to be executable, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B). You may choose not to perform any inciting effects that suggest this. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether it is genuine or fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the feature section 108IW, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 seconds, in the variable display that shortens the rescue time, and the mode transition effect or right-hit notification is executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is set until the start of the next variation, and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a first modification will be described in which a postponement period is provided until the start of the next variation and the mode transition effect and right-handed hit notification are executed.

FIG. 12-43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-43, in modification 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In addition, in the first modification, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is the same as the starting winning determining process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Moreover, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Moreover, the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Further, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Moreover, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Moreover, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Moreover, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". Moreover, the small hit opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Moreover, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) and variation pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. It is. In addition, in modification example 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. This differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is transmitted.

In addition, in modification 1, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit ending process (step 100IWS121) are the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to the small winning ending process (step S120) shown in FIG. It is similar to

FIG. 12-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modification 1. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is similar to those shown in FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17. In modification example 1, when the relief time saving determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) to the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next change. A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). Note that the process in step 100IWS175 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 12-17.

FIG. 12-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in Modification 1, in the next change postponement process, a case is shown in which the time reduction state is entered at the timing when the postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) until the start of the next change has elapsed. It is not limited to the form. For example, it may be configured such that a right-handed notification is given in the next variation postponement process, and the time reduction state is entered at the start of the postponement period or in the middle of the postponement period until the start of the next variation. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the time saving state may be controlled and the right-handed hit notification may be performed, or the time saving state may not be controlled and only the right-handed hitting notification is performed. There are many possible ways.

Further, in the first modification, a case is shown in which 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next change postponement process, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is configured so that the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the time reduction will be different if the relief time reduction occurs during normal state. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and it is measured in the next change postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onward. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative pattern, but displays only the small pattern, and is configured so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. Good too.

In addition, in modification 1, when the relief time is shortened, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts, but this is not limited to such a mode. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which the next variation postponement process similar to Modification Example 1 is executed to extend the period until the next variation is started.

Further, as described above, if the present invention is also applied to the display of fluctuations in time reduction, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next fluctuation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period for the fluctuating display in the event of a time shortening can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuating display, and processing related to right hit notification etc. can also be done in the case of relief time shortening, etc. can be executed in the same process.

FIG. 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-46, in modification example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and the When the symbol (no time saver) is stopped and displayed, the missed symbol (no time saver) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the fluctuating display of the special symbols is finished and the losing symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5 second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078 IWS1135 reference). Next, when the 0.5 second symbol determination period ends, the process moves to a 20 second next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46 (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the next change postponement period, right-handed hitting notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when the next change postponement period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color.

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for the losing symbol, and after the symbol determination period has elapsed, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (i.e., the start of the next fluctuation postponement period). (at the start), four jackpot signals may be output. The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next variation postponement period after the symbol confirmation period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure to receive signals externally.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, at the start of the next variation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next variation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that he or she will play right-handed. A test signal or an external output signal indicating this may be output, or a right-handed hit notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed hitting and to notify right-handed hitting at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the feature section 108IW described above, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected, and the high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds is changed. Although the case where the display is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving is different will be described below. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining variations 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving.

First, using FIG. 12-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern in a time saving state based on relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the feature section 108IW mentioned above, either the case where the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process (without becoming a jackpot or a time saver error), or after the jackpot or a time saver error occurs (the next jackpot or time saver error) 12-8 (F), (G) ) is selected and a variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to perform a countdown effect and an effect effect, and after the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled, the variable pattern table E (see figure) is uniformly displayed. 12-8(E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, however, the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in Modification 2 of FIG. 12-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 fluctuation displays after the RAM clearing process, from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before the rescue time is shortened. also selects fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 12-7 (B)) and executes the same fluctuation display as normal, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (B)) is selected. (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the 5-second variation display may be executed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Modification 3 of Figure 12-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after a jackpot, the fluctuation display when executing the 800th fluctuation display From the pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)), a variation pattern for relief time reduction variation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. Note that the feature section 108IW described above is configured to execute a time-saving rush effect during a variable display, and to execute a mode transition effect and right hit notification during a symbol confirmation period, but for example, during a 25-second variable display. It may be configured so that a mode transition effect or a right hit notification is executed in (Accordingly, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that shortens the rescue time is different between the case where the rescue time is shortened after RAM clear processing and the case where the rescue time is shortened after a jackpot. In addition, the effects can be made different by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after transitioning to the time saving state via the relief time reduction.

For example, as shown in modification example 4 of FIG. 12-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) may be selected even from 10 variations before to 1 variation, which shortens the rescue time. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time reduction to display the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the jackpot. is selected to execute a 5 second fluctuation display at a high rate, and during the time saving state based on the second rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 12-8 (E)) to display a 1.5 second high speed display. It may be configured to perform a variation display of variation.

Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-48 to 12-54. In addition, regarding the second embodiment, mainly the parts different from the first embodiment will be explained.

In the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 12-8(F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 12-8(G) are used immediately before the relief time is shortened. No variation pattern table is provided for this purpose. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time is shortened, the player will not be aware of the fact that the relief time is just before the shortening due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent this from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 12-8(I) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 12-8(J) are used to reduce the relief time. There is no variation pattern table provided for variations when this happens. With this configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the control terminal is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 should be used (step 100IWS1716).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process in Example 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a caption indicating that the rescue time-saving function is provided is displayed (see Figure 12-26). There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time is shortened or that the time for relief is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a telop explaining the reduction in relief time is always displayed in a common manner.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is soon to be shortened, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the caption display is more restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution rate decreases, (or not) is desirable. With this configuration, when the rescue time is shortened, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that the time saving control is to be started due to the rescue time shortening) is suddenly executed, which creates a surprise for the player. You can improve your interest by giving.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed. In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure execution settings.

FIG. 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(A). Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the preview performance, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened, whether or not to execute the preview effect and the mode of effect when executed are as follows. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the transition is made to the time saving state C, the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving). (In this example, the background image has an orange display color) (see step 078 IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to relief time saving) is suddenly executed, so it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase interest. can.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the inciting performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Processing for executing a countdown presentation, effect presentation, and processing for displaying an initial roll according to the number of times until the rescue time is shortened are omitted.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to perform an inciting performance, a countdown performance, and an effect performance according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining is 10 or less), the execution of incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects are more restricted than in the previous period (for example, , the execution rate is reduced, or it is not executed at all). With this configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time-saving control based on relief time-saving is to be started) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (normal fluctuation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rush effect or the time-saving rush effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., notification that time saving control by saving time saving is to be started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 12-51, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the special symbol variable time ( For example, after 12 seconds have elapsed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the losing symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the relief time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started in the same way as the previous variable display. When the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the winning symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period. (See step 100IWS1137). When the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, the image display device 5 displays a background image (this example In this case, the display color is switched to (the background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated. Further, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-51, during a period in which variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, right-handed hit notification is performed (FIG. 12-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production related to the transition to the time-saving state C from becoming complicated, while making the player aware that the player is in a gaming state in which he or she is playing right-handed, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be explained. FIG. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIG. 12-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (A), when the special symbol variation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B). Then, a decorative pattern 100IW100 and a small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed patterns.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed.

Note that if the pending memory is not stored after the symbol confirmation period has passed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In this case, the background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) may be switched to, and the right hit notification may be executed.

Furthermore, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), an explanation regarding saving time saving using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time saving function and (explanation of the performance) may also be performed. In addition, although the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the effects that suggest that the rescue time is near are not executed, the subtitles 100IW103 as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B) are displayed at any timing. may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in Figure 12-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that time saving control by saving time saving will start) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise and increasing their interest. can be improved.

Further, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened. Further, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, a modification 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or a modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-53 may be used.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 1])
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) is executed in which the effect display that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) is made difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 12-53 (C), the blackout state is resolved, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are removed and derived by the combination of symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or a sound effect is output to notify that the time saving state (relief time saving) control is to be started. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in Figure 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modified Example 2])
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in the second modification of the second embodiment.

In modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (A), a variable display that shortens the rescue time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time (12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds have elapsed, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of broken patterns on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B). However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, so the small symbols 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C), on the image display device 5, a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see is performed. executed. Further, the special symbol variation time elapses while the time-saving entry performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed symbols. The time-saving rush performance (blackout performance) continues to be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, the blackout state is resolved in the image display device 5 and the time saving state C ( The background image is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) according to the time-saving state (via the rescue time-saving mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), a right-handed hit notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

In addition, at the timings of FIGS. 12-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 12-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A), (B) is performed. An explanation regarding time saving (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or an effect of saving time saving) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic part 108IW shown above, a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is determined in a period before the relief time becomes short (for example, a period in which the number of remaining variations until a relief variation occurs is 10 or less). , deciding to execute a notice performance is restricted, while in the second embodiment, neither is restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the preview of the type of preview performance for which the expectation level is not very high is determined. The performance may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of a variation pattern that is a super reach, and to restrict the execution of a type of preview performance with a high degree of expectation among the preview performances.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened and the effect that suggests that the relief time is near (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) include an inciting effect, a countdown effect, Effects may be executed, initial results may be displayed depending on the number of times until the rescue time is shortened, and a telop display while waiting for a customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in Figure 12-26) may be displayed. Unlimited. For example, an action effect in which the movable body 32 is operated at any timing during a variable display or while the variation is stopped, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific manner (for example, a rainbow light), and a light emission effect in which the movable body 32 Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of a vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc., it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is almost short.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command (for example, the effect control command to instruct recovery from a power outage or the effect control command to instruct initialization) that is transmitted when the power is turned on. , If the performance control board 12 cannot receive the command normally (for example, if the command is missed or the command is garbled), the normal Although it is possible to carry out the effect, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion effect that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (note that once a jackpot has occurred, it may not be possible to execute possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, each time a variation display is executed, the command is sent The relief suggestion performance may not be executed if the message (received by the user) cannot be received normally. In this case, the relief suggestion performance may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specification command could not be received normally, or the relief suggestion effect may not be executed until the next jackpot occurs. The suggestive performance may not be executed. Also, for example, if the reception cannot be received normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in a manner and execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will shorten the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to being shortened). You can. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, although the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of a jackpot during a small winning game; The configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or a jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set every time the relief time saving occurs, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numeric value) that is set when the second time saving time is transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numeric value) that is set when the first time saving time is being saved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same performance (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state after the jackpot and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above have shown the case where the time-saving state of time-saving failure and the relief time-saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns), it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state when the time saving is missed and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

As described above, the present feature section 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, game control As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that control of the special state will start based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2)). 12-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is satisfied, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50). According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-53(B), it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variably displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a form that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout occurs at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification performance is This is a mode in which the background display in the means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in Figure 12-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Further, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2) ), and at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53 (D) and 12-54 (D), an explanation will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any one of the means 1A to 5A, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variable pattern as shown in FIG. 12-48). When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normally variable )), and the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance after a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), a backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means even if the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process that initializes the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the backup storage A recovery means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when playing the game.

(Means 8A) In any one of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display has been executed in a state, and special status information and execution count information that can be stored even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information, and an initialization means (e.g. game control (a part in which the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means has special status information, execution number information, and numerical information stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized). However, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) are disclosed.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a variable display pattern that is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns with long display periods (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14), and the state controlling means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7). As shown in A) and (B), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined in both cases of jackpot and miss. When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) have a higher probability of being determined in the event of a jackpot than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), and special conditions are met. In the previous predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, in Figure 12-8 ( As shown in F) and (G), just before the relief time becomes short, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown performance, an effect performance, and a caption display while waiting for a customer), and the suggestive performance execution means includes: During the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, the proportion of suggestive effects is higher than during the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. ~The part where S809 is executed. Also, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be met, and it is possible to increase the player's interest. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, explanation performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation is given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)) The explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result. 12-31), the percentage of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 12-31). , the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 12-32(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, a performance mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than that of the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A; see FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) are disclosed.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a gaming machine as shown in FIG. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13) and a special variable display pattern (for example, the variable pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. (for example, the part that executes the numeric information in FIG. As shown, the variable display pattern determining means (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In this case, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display using the special variable display pattern is executed. A specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance to notify that the special state is being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, executing step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100) part. 12-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special condition is satisfied and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is A special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies that the is derived and displayed (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. 41 (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, there is a fluctuation This is realized by determining pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135; see FIG. 12-36), the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when As shown, the production control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 100IWS847. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of the means 1C to the means 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 12-18). According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. ) outputs a special signal at the start of According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control (where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game media should be ejected toward a special path (for example, during a gaming state in which the player is assumed to play right-handed). a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a right-hand ball is being played, and a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a player is in a right-hand hitting state; The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing area, and the special output means is configured to display the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) are disclosed.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means that can update numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a variable means that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. display pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48); By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of display execution times, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS170 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, a special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to shortening rescue time) is displayed to notify that special state control will start. It further includes a special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) capable of executing the display (orange). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Further, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) in which a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means is a notice target, the look-ahead notice execution means comprising: Among the variable displays corresponding to pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to perform a look-ahead preview effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, while the variable display that the special condition is met can be executed. Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the performance.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, see FIG. 12-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any one of the means 1D to 3D includes a means for executing a suggestive effect that can execute a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) The suggestive effect execution means limits execution of the suggestive effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), explanations will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) are disclosed.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a microcomputer for game control 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern that corresponds to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) The microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537) can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the updating means, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of the display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results becomes low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638 in the production control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer and a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The rate at which the performance is executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703; see FIGS. 12-28(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of pre-reading preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), and a pre-read notice execution means capable of executing a pre-read notice performance (for example, a chance effect or a pending change effect) in which the variable display corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending storage means is the subject of the preview, The look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that targets a variable display when the special condition is met among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met; Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is met is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1a) to (means 10a) are disclosed.

(Means 1a) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. I can do it.

In addition, although this example shows a case where an initial value is set in the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not give time savings, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time savings counter is not set. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the first special symbol mainly changes in the normal state, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 100). According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., variable probability state, time saving state) (e.g., FIG. As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

Note that this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated on a low probability low base (normal state), a high probability high base (variable probability state), and a low probability high base (time saving state). It is not limited to the form. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probable variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability low base (latent probability variable). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that performs a lottery in which a probability change state falls to a normal state.

Although this example shows a case where the second special symbol is given priority, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first starting winning hole, and a high probability low base (small winning RUSH) where small wins occur frequently is provided. It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

Although this example shows a case where a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the updating means 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) is configured. may have been done. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (e.g., time saving error) is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 12 As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining numerical information to be updated by the updating means even when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held in the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100 ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes different productions in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 12-47). The portion shown in Example 4) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes a common production in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100). (portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the game that is necessary to execute multiple types of processing including variable display control and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating the progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control to the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is, Numerical information is updated depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the microcomputer 100 for game control (For example, as shown in FIG. S110 to S113), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100) In the normal state, the game is played by ejecting the game media to the first path, and in the special state, The game is played by firing the game media into the second path, and the firing promotion notification means executes the firing promotion notification to the effect that the game media should be fired into the second path during execution of the third process (see Figure 12-46). ). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by performing the firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the firing promotion notification earlier when being controlled to the special state.

(Means 1b-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a variable display control, and an advantageous state control. Process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part of the microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100) 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100). 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the second process regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) 5, when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means establishes the special condition. The third process for controlling the original special state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state is changed during execution of the third process. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a performance execution means (see FIG. 12-46) that performs a notification performance to notify that the system is controlled. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by performing the firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the firing promotion notification earlier when being controlled to the special state.

Although this example shows a case where priority is given to processing related to jackpots, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that priority is given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a right hit is notified in the next fluctuation postponement process which is the third process, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that only a mode transition effect suggesting a shift to a time saving state is executed without giving a right-handed hit notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed, and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, the means 1b-2, or the means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, for game control (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 12-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) The means 3b includes a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, and The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is different when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that executes) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the finalization time of the display result is different depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130). According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1c) to (means 6c) are disclosed.

(Means 1c) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. The update means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-13) and the state controlled by the state control means can update the numerical information based on the above information. a state information control means for controlling specifiable state information, the state control means being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and then changing to a special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) (in the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means updates the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is " 0''), when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the state information is set to the second numerical value when the control is performed to the advantageous state and then to the special state (for example, in Figure 12- As shown in 19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), and the special condition is established. When the special state is controlled, the state information is set to a third value different from the first value and the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. part, that is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, the state It is possible to transmit specific information depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, as shown in Figure 12-10, as shown in Figure 12-19, The part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

Although this example shows a case where a time-saving state A designation command and a time-saving state C designation command are transmitted as the specific information, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that allows it to be specified that the user is in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, or a time saving state via a relief time reduction. Good too. For example, when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different ways depending on the gaming state, and depending on which command is received, The fanfare period and ending period may be configured to change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is established again after being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and the state control means It is possible to execute a common effect when controlling to a special state based on the fulfillment of a condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means has derived and displayed the special display result. Different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 100IWS636, The part that executes S638) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means: When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured such that the performance can be executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1d) to (means 4d) are disclosed.

(Means 1d) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. An updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above, and when the power supply is stopped, The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of execution times of the variable display, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When a condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means uses predetermined information for performance control when power supply is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on receiving the predetermined information. It is characterized by being able to execute a suggestive effect regarding the number of execution times of the variable display during a predetermined period after the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120) do. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines.

Note that in this example, the initial roll is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a background change, a fluctuating effect up to 100 revolutions, and a suggestive effect by displaying on a demo screen or menu screen.

Note that when a command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 12-12) is sent, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, in FIG. As shown in 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Note that although this example shows a case where a command that can specify the value of the rescue time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, sending a command that can specify a predetermined range such as specifying 1 to 99 rotations in units of 100 rotations, specifying 100 to 199 rotations, specifying 500 to 599 rotations, etc. It may be configured such that if the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if the value is 127 or less, a command that can be specified is transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of special conditions based on specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the production control CPU 120) can specify, as specific information, that the difference between the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is less than a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a command specifying the number of times of saving time reduction 1) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

Note that this example shows a case where the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction 2, which is the second specific information, is not transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to 3d, the production control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120, )), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect each time a second predetermined number of variable displays smaller than the first predetermined number of times is performed before a special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the performance control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) to 12-38 (F)). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Note that although this example shows a case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the rescue time reduction number counter.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) are disclosed.

(Means 1e-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; There is a difference between when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the storage means are initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition, and when it is controlled to a special state at . It is characterized by executing effects (for example, the portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; After the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, the portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 in FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case after a jackpot.

Note that the configurations of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to this feature section 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed. A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means controlling the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of The update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a corresponding specific value, and the updating means can be controlled to be in a special state when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed. There are multiple types of advantageous states, including specific advantageous states and special advantageous states, and depending on which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled, the numerical information is updated. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. The degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is set as a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is set as a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after a fixed variable time reduction is set as after a normal jackpot. It may be configured such that the advantage is higher than the time saving state of , and the time saving state of relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state after a normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is controlled when the variable display of the first identification information triggers the advantageous state and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers the control into the advantageous state. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and 800 times, which is the condition that the relief time is controlled to be shortened when controlled to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol and when controlled to be a jackpot based on the second special symbol. The structure may be configured so that the number of fluctuations is the same.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time, than setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). However, it is only necessary to configure the advantageous degree in saving time to be higher than the advantageous degree in the time-saving state after the jackpot. Note that the rescue time reduction achievement rate is higher when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"); Since the number of times is 800 (substantially until the next jackpot), it may be more advantageous than the time-saving state via a jackpot (for example, the number of time-savings is usually 100 after a jackpot).

(Means 4f) Any one of the means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5f) When any of the means 1f to 4f is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of the means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6f is based on, for example, a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E).

(Means 7f) Any one of the means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any of the means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a start condition established when a start condition is satisfied. a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on a start condition; a hold storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when a start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup storage means capable of retaining numerical information and pending information; an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met; and power supply is started. and a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the pending information stored in the pending storage means based on the storage contents of the backup storage device, and the state control device includes: , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can be controlled to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the control by initialization while suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization processing, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when recovering from a power outage, the Restore the relief time reduction counter and pending memory, and configure the system so that when the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of recovery reaches the 800th variation and the conditions for the relief time reduction control are met, the relief time reduction control becomes possible. Bye.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, an advantageous state is achieved when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and the variation that becomes the condition for controlling the relief time to be shortened depending on when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of times is the same.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or 2g, there is an unfavorable setting value in which the probability of being controlled into an advantageous state is a first probability, and an advantageous setting where the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") will reduce the number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, and will shorten the rescue time, compared to setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). What is necessary is to configure the advantageous degree of this to be higher than the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the jackpot. Note that setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of failure than setting an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so it is easier to save time. ,Relief time saving is always 800 time saving times (substantially until the next jackpot), so it is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot (for example, usually after the jackpot, the time saving number is 100 times). Good too.

(Means 4b) Any one of the means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5g) When any of the means 1g to 4g is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5g, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of the means 1g to 5g, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) Any one of the means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, the state control means comprising an updating means. The updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that when a special condition is satisfied, control is possible to enter a special state, and the updating means is configured to change the first identification information The system further includes a suggestion performance execution means capable of updating the numerical information depending on whether the display is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a suggestion production related to the establishment of the special condition. In the execution means, the ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes is used to execute the suggestion effect varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. This is the mode of doing so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h, for example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to execute a countdown effect that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time. The ratio may be configured to change according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the performance mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown performance in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and in which mode it is displayed. The period until the suggested special conditions come into effect differs depending on whether the special conditions are met. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to use, for example, the table shown in FIG. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counting down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to 3h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to 4h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to 5h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means has been operated or that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 6h, for example, when the game machine shifts to the demonstration state, the game ball is activated by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the starting port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) Any of the means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 7h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 8h) Any one of the means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 8h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and Setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggested setting suggestion performance; The effect executing means has the same rate of executing the suggested effect regardless of the setting value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complexity of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to display a caption while waiting for a customer regardless of which set value is set. The configuration may be configured so that the ratio is the same.

(Means 10h) Any one of the means 1h to 6h and the means 9h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting a setting value, and the setting suggestion performance execution means executes a setting suggestion performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different, and the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is the same depending on the specific mode, regardless of the set value of the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests a setting value (for example, a performance with different execution rates depending on the setting value), it is also possible to execute a performance that indicates a setting value, while waiting for customers in a red performance mode regardless of which setting value is set. The configuration may be such that the execution rate of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means determines whether the power supply is performed depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed during a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution rate of the ticker display and countdown effect while waiting for a customer is different after the initialization process and after the power outage recovery. You can configure it like this.

(Means 12h) Any one of the means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to When the special variable display pattern is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, and the special state is set when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance for notifying that the device is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using a pattern table for relief time saving fluctuation failure shown in FIG. 12-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. Yes, when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is longer than the predetermined period. Compared to the previous period, when the display result of variable display does not result in a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any one of the means 1h to 13h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means can execute the preview effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result does not become a specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than in the case where no specific display result is obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met is higher than the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing preview effects is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration in which, for example, a table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance.

(Means 15h) Any one of the means 1h to 14h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means is capable of executing the preview effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result, and the display of the variable display When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of preview effects executed in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview performance depending on the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area, a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area, and a third display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
After displaying the effect video that progresses at a second speed in the second period, it is possible to perform a still effect of displaying a still image obtained by making the effect video still.
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, variable display of decorative identification information can be performed in response to variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information,
In the third display area, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information indicating that variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are being performed,
The gaming machine is capable of variably displaying the special identification information in the same period in both the first period and the second period.